doc/src/widgets-and-layouts/styles.qdoc
author Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
Mon, 11 Jan 2010 14:00:40 +0000
changeset 0 1918ee327afb
permissions -rw-r--r--
Revision: 200952
Ignore whitespace changes - Everywhere: Within whitespace: At end of lines:
0
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
     1
/****************************************************************************
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
     2
**
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
     3
** Copyright (C) 2009 Nokia Corporation and/or its subsidiary(-ies).
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
     4
** All rights reserved.
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
     5
** Contact: Nokia Corporation (qt-info@nokia.com)
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
     6
**
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
     7
** This file is part of the documentation of the Qt Toolkit.
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
     8
**
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
     9
** $QT_BEGIN_LICENSE:LGPL$
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
    10
** No Commercial Usage
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
    11
** This file contains pre-release code and may not be distributed.
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
    12
** You may use this file in accordance with the terms and conditions
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
    13
** contained in the Technology Preview License Agreement accompanying
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
    14
** this package.
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
    15
**
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
    16
** GNU Lesser General Public License Usage
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
    17
** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU Lesser
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
    18
** General Public License version 2.1 as published by the Free Software
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
    19
** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.LGPL included in the
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
    20
** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
    21
** ensure the GNU Lesser General Public License version 2.1 requirements
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
    22
** will be met: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/lgpl-2.1.html.
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
    23
**
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
    24
** In addition, as a special exception, Nokia gives you certain additional
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
    25
** rights.  These rights are described in the Nokia Qt LGPL Exception
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
    26
** version 1.1, included in the file LGPL_EXCEPTION.txt in this package.
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
    27
**
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
    28
** If you have questions regarding the use of this file, please contact
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
    29
** Nokia at qt-info@nokia.com.
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
    30
**
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
    31
**
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
    32
**
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
    33
**
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
    34
**
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
    35
**
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
    36
**
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
    37
**
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
    38
** $QT_END_LICENSE$
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
    39
**
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
    40
****************************************************************************/
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
    41
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
    42
/*!
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
    43
    \group appearance
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
    44
    \title Widget Appearance and Style
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
    45
    \brief Classes used for customizing UI appearance and style.
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
    46
*/
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
    47
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
    48
/*!
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
    49
    \page style-reference.html
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
    50
    \title Implementing Styles and Style Aware Widgets
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
    51
    \brief An overview of styles and the styling of widgets.
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
    52
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
    53
    \ingroup frameworks-technologies
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
    54
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
    55
    \previouspage Widget Classes
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
    56
    \contentspage Widgets and Layouts
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
    57
    \nextpage {Qt Style Sheets}{Style sheets}
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
    58
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
    59
    Styles (classes that inherit QStyle) draw on behalf of widgets
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
    60
    and encapsulate the look and feel of a GUI. The QStyle class is
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
    61
    an abstract base class that encapsulates the look and feel of a
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
    62
    GUI. Qt's built-in widgets use it to perform nearly all of their
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
    63
    drawing, ensuring that they look exactly like the equivalent
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
    64
    native widgets.
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
    65
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
    66
    Several styles are built into Qt (e.g., windows style and motif style).
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
    67
    Other styles are only available on specific platforms (such as
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
    68
    the windows XP style). Custom styles are made available as plugins
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
    69
    or by creating an instance of the style class in an application and
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
    70
    setting it with QApplication::setStyle().
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
    71
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
    72
    To implement a new style, you inherit one of Qt's existing styles
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
    73
    - the one most resembling the style you want to create - and
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
    74
    reimplement a few virtual functions. This process is somewhat
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
    75
    involved, and we therefore provide this overview. We give a
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
    76
    step-by-step walkthrough of how to style individual Qt widgets.
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
    77
    We will examine the QStyle virtual functions, member variables,
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
    78
    and enumerations.
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
    79
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
    80
    The part of this document that does not concern the styling of
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
    81
    individual widgets is meant to be read sequentially because later
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
    82
    sections tend to depend on earlier ones. The description of the
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
    83
    widgets can be used for reference while implementing a style.
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
    84
    However, you may need to consult the Qt source code in some cases.
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
    85
    The sequence in the styling process should become clear after
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
    86
    reading this document, which will aid you in locating relevant code.
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
    87
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
    88
    To develop style aware widgets (i.e., widgets that conform to
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
    89
    the style in which they are drawn), you need to draw them using the
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
    90
    current style. This document shows how widgets draw themselves
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
    91
    and which possibilities the style gives them.
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
    92
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
    93
    \tableofcontents
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
    94
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
    95
    \section1 Classes for Widget Styling
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
    96
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
    97
    These classes are used to customize an application's appearance and
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
    98
    style.
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
    99
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   100
    \annotatedlist appearance
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   101
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   102
    \section1 The QStyle implementation
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   103
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   104
    The API of QStyle contains functions that draw the widgets, static
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   105
    helper functions to do common and difficult tasks (e.g.,
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   106
    calculating the position of slider handles) and functions to do
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   107
    the various calculations necessary while drawing (e.g., for the
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   108
    widgets to calculate their size hints). The style also help some
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   109
    widgets with the layout of their contents. In addition, it creates
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   110
    a QPalette that contains \l{QBrush}es to draw with.
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   111
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   112
    QStyle draws graphical elements; an element is a widget or a
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   113
    widget part like a push button bevel, a window frame, or a scroll
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   114
    bar. Most draw functions now take four arguments:
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   115
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   116
    \list
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   117
    \o an enum value specifying which graphical element to draw
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   118
    \o a QStyleOption specifying how and where to render that element
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   119
    \o a QPainter that should be used to draw the element
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   120
    \o a QWidget on which the drawing is performed (optional)
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   121
    \endlist
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   122
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   123
    When a widget asks a style to draw an element, it provides the style
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   124
    with a QStyleOption, which is a class that contains the information
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   125
    necessary for drawing. Thanks to QStyleOption, it is possible to make
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   126
    QStyle draw widgets without linking in any code for the widget. This
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   127
    makes it possible to use \l{QStyle}'s draw functions on any paint
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   128
    device. Ie you can draw a combobox on any widget, not just on a
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   129
    QComboBox.
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   130
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   131
    The widget is passed as the last argument in case the style needs
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   132
    it to perform special effects (such as animated default buttons on
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   133
    Mac OS X), but it isn't mandatory.
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   134
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   135
    We will in the course of this section look at the style elements,
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   136
    the style options, and the functions of QStyle. Finally, we describe
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   137
    how the palette is used.
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   138
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   139
    Items in item views is drawn by \l{Delegate Classes}{delegates} in
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   140
    Qt. The item view headers are still drawn by the style. Qt's
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   141
    default delegate, QStyledItemDelegate, draws its items partially
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   142
    through the current style; it draws the check box indicators and
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   143
    calculate bounding rectangles for the elements of which the item
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   144
    consists. In this document, we only describe how to implement a
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   145
    QStyle subclass. If you wish to add support for other datatypes
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   146
    than those supported by the QStyledItemDelegate, you need to
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   147
    implement a custom delegate. Note that delegates must be set
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   148
    programmatically for each individual widget (i.e., default
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   149
    delegates cannot be provided as plugins).
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   150
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   151
    \section2 The Style Elements
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   152
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   153
    A style element is a graphical part of a GUI. A widget consists
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   154
    of a hierarchy (or tree) of style elements. For instance, when a
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   155
    style receives a request to draw a push button (from QPushButton,
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   156
    for example), it draws a label (text and icon), a button bevel,
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   157
    and a focus frame. The button bevel, in turn, consists of a frame
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   158
    around the bevel and two other elements, which we will look at
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   159
    later. Below is a conceptual illustration of the push button
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   160
    element tree. We will see the actual tree for QPushButton when we
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   161
    go through the individual widgets.
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   162
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   163
    \image javastyle/conceptualpushbuttontree.png
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   164
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   165
    Widgets are not necessarily drawn by asking the style to draw
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   166
    only one element. Widgets can make several calls to the style to
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   167
    draw different elements. An example is QTabWidget, which draws its
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   168
    tabs and frame individually.
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   169
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   170
    There are three element types: primitive elements, control
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   171
    elements, and complex control elements. The elements are defined
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   172
    by the \l{QStyle::}{ComplexControl}, \l{QStyle::}{ControlElement},
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   173
    and \l{QStyle::}{PrimitiveElement} enums. The values of
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   174
    each element enum has a prefix to identify their type: \c{CC_} for
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   175
    complex elements, \c{CE_} for control elements, and \c{PE_} for
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   176
    primitive elements. We will in the following three sections see what
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   177
    defines the different elements and see examples of widgets that use
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   178
    them.
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   179
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   180
    The QStyle class description contains a list of these elements and
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   181
    their roles in styling widgets. We will see how they are used when
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   182
    we style individual widgets.
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   183
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   184
    \section3 Primitive Elements
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   185
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   186
    Primitive elements are GUI elements that are common and often used
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   187
    by several widgets. Examples of these are frames, button bevels,
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   188
    and arrows for spin boxes, scroll bars, and combo boxes.
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   189
    Primitive elements cannot exist on their own: they are always part
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   190
    of a larger construct. They take no part in the interaction with
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   191
    the user, but are passive decorations in the GUI.
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   192
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   193
    \section3 Control Elements
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   194
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   195
    A control element performs an action or displays information
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   196
    to the user. Examples of control elements are push buttons, check
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   197
    boxes, and header sections in tables and tree views. Control
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   198
    elements are not necessarily complete widgets such as push
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   199
    buttons, but can also be widget parts such as tab bar tabs and
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   200
    scroll bar sliders. They differ from primitive elements in that
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   201
    they are not passive, but fill a function in the interaction with
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   202
    the user. Controls that consist of several elements often use the
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   203
    style to calculate the bounding rectangles of the elements. The
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   204
    available sub elements are defined by the \l{QStyle::}{SubElement}
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   205
    enum. This enum is only used for calculating bounding rectangles,
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   206
    and sub elements are as such not graphical elements to be drawn
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   207
    like primitive, control, and complex elements.
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   208
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   209
    \section3 Complex Control Elements
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   210
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   211
    Complex control elements contain sub controls. Complex controls
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   212
    behave differently depending on where the user handles them with
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   213
    the mouse and which keyboard keys are pressed. This is dependent
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   214
    on which sub control (if any) that the mouse is over or received a
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   215
    mouse press. Examples of complex controls are scroll bars and
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   216
    combo boxes. With a scroll bar, you can use the mouse to move the
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   217
    slider and press the line up and line down buttons. The available
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   218
    sub controls are defined by the \l{QStyle}{SubControl} enum.
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   219
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   220
    In addition to drawing, the style needs to provide the widgets
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   221
    with information on which sub control (if any) a mouse press was
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   222
    made on. For instance, a QScrollBar needs to know if the user
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   223
    pressed the slider, the slider groove, or one of the buttons.
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   224
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   225
    Note that sub controls are not the same as the control elements
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   226
    described in the previous section. You cannot use the style to
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   227
    draw a sub control; the style will only calculate the bounding
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   228
    rectangle in which the sub control should be drawn. It is common,
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   229
    though, that complex elements use control and primitive elements
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   230
    to draw their sub controls, which is an approach that is
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   231
    frequently used by the built-in styles in Qt and also the Java
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   232
    style. For instance, the Java style uses PE_IndicatorCheckBox to
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   233
    draw the check box in group boxes (which is a sub control of
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   234
    CC_GroupBox). Some sub controls have an equivalent control element,
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   235
    e.g., the scroll bar slider (SC_SCrollBarSlider and
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   236
    CE_ScrollBarSlider).
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   237
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   238
    \section3 Other QStyle Tasks
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   239
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   240
    The style elements and widgets, as mentioned, use the style to
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   241
    calculate bounding rectangles of sub elements and sub controls,
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   242
    and pixel metrics, which is a style dependent size in screen
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   243
    pixels, for measures when drawing. The available rectangles and
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   244
    pixel metrics are represented by three enums in QStyle:
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   245
    \l{QStyle::}{SubElement}, \l{QStyle::}{SubControl}, and
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   246
    \l{QStyle::}{PixelMetric}. Values of the enums can easily by
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   247
    identified as they start with SE_, SC_ and PM_.
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   248
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   249
    The style also contain a set of style hints, which is
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   250
    represented as values in the \l{QStyle::}{StyleHint} enum. All
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   251
    widgets do not have the same functionality and look in the
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   252
    different styles. For instance, when the menu items in a menu do not
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   253
    fit in a single column on the screen, some styles support
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   254
    scrolling while others draw more than one column to fit all items.
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   255
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   256
    A style usually has a set of standard images (such as a warning, a
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   257
    question, and an error image) for message boxes, file dialogs,
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   258
    etc. QStyle provides the \l{QStyle::}{StandardPixmap} enum. Its
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   259
    values represent the standard images. Qt's widgets use these, so
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   260
    when you implement a custom style you should supply the images
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   261
    used by the style that is being implemented.
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   262
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   263
    The style calculates the spacing between widgets in layouts. There
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   264
    are two ways the style can handle these calculations. You can set
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   265
    the PM_LayoutHorizontalSpacing and PM_LayoutVerticalSpacing, which
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   266
    is the way the java style does it (through QCommonStyle).
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   267
    Alternatively, you can implement QStyle::layoutSpacing() and
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   268
    QStyle::layoutSpacingImplementation() if you need more control over 
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   269
    this part of the layout. In these functions you can calculate the
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   270
    spacing based on control types (QSizePolicy::ControlType) for
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   271
    different size policies (QSizePolicy::Policy) and also the style
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   272
    option for the widget in question.
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   273
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   274
    \section2 Style Options
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   275
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   276
    The sub-classes of QStyleOption contain all information necessary
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   277
    to style the individual elements. Style options are instantiated - 
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   278
    usually on the stack - and filled out by the caller of the QStyle
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   279
    function. Depending on what is drawn the style will expect
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   280
    different a different style option class. For example, the
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   281
    QStyle::PE_FrameFocusRect element expects a QStyleOptionFocusRect
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   282
    argument, and it's possible to create custom subclasses that a
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   283
    custom style can use. The style options keep public variables
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   284
    for performance reasons.
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   285
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   286
    The widgets can be in a number of different states, which are
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   287
    defined by the \l{QStyle::}{State} enum. Some of the state flags have
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   288
    different meanings depending on the widget, but others are common
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   289
    for all widgets like State_Disabled. It is QStyleOption that sets
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   290
    the common states with QStyleOption::initFrom(); the rest of the
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   291
    states are set by the individual widgets.
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   292
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   293
    Most notably, the style options contain the palette and bounding
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   294
    rectangles of the widgets to be drawn. Most widgets have
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   295
    specialized style options. QPushButton and QCheckBox, for
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   296
    instance, use QStyleOptionButton as style option, which contain
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   297
    the text, icon, and the size of their icon. The exact contents of
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   298
    all options are described when we go through individual widgets.
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   299
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   300
    When reimplementing QStyle functions that take a
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   301
    QStyleOption parameter, you often need to cast the
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   302
    QStyleOption to a subclass (e.g., QStyleOptionFocusRect). For
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   303
    safety, you can use qstyleoption_cast() to ensure that the
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   304
    pointer type is correct. If the object isn't of the right type,
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   305
    qstyleoption_cast() returns 0. For example:
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   306
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   307
    \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_qt4-styles.qdoc 0
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   308
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   309
    The following code snippet illustrates how to use QStyle to
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   310
    draw the focus rectangle from a custom widget's paintEvent():
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   311
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   312
    \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_qt4-styles.qdoc 1
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   313
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   314
    The next example shows how to derive from an existing style to
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   315
    customize the look of a graphical element:
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   316
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   317
    \snippet doc/src/snippets/customstyle/customstyle.h 0
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   318
    \codeline
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   319
    \snippet doc/src/snippets/customstyle/customstyle.cpp 2
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   320
    \snippet doc/src/snippets/customstyle/customstyle.cpp 3
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   321
    \snippet doc/src/snippets/customstyle/customstyle.cpp 4
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   322
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   323
    \section2 QStyle Functions
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   324
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   325
    The QStyle class defines three functions for drawing the primitive,
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   326
    control, and complex elements:
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   327
    \l{QStyle::}{drawPrimitive()},
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   328
    \l{QStyle::}{drawControl()}, and
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   329
    \l{QStyle::}{drawComplexControl()}. The functions takes the
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   330
    following parameters:
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   331
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   332
    \list
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   333
        \o the enum value of the element to draw
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   334
        \o a QStyleOption which contains the information needed to
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   335
           draw the element.
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   336
        \o a QPainter with which to draw the element.
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   337
        \o a pointer to a QWidget, typically the widget
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   338
           that the element is painted on.
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   339
    \endlist
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   340
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   341
    Not all widgets send a pointer to themselves. If the style
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   342
    option sent to the function does not contain the information you
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   343
    need, you should check the widget implementation to see if it
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   344
    sends a pointer to itself.
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   345
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   346
    The QStyle class also provides helper functions that are used
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   347
    when drawing the elements. The \l{QStyle::}{drawItemText()}
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   348
    function draws text within a specified rectangle and taking a
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   349
    QPalette as a parameter. The \l{QStyle::}{drawItemPixmap()}
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   350
    function helps to align a pixmap within a specified bounding
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   351
    rectangle.
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   352
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   353
    Other QStyle functions do various calculations for the
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   354
    functions that draw. The widgets also use these functions for
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   355
    calculating size hints and also for bounding rectangle
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   356
    calculations if they draw several style elements themselves.
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   357
    As with the functions that draw elements the helper functions
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   358
    typically takes the same arguments.
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   359
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   360
    \list
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   361
        \o The \l{QStyle::}{subElementRect()} function takes a
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   362
        \l{QStyle::}{SubElement} enum value, and calculates a bounding
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   363
        rectangle for a sub element. The style uses this function to
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   364
        know where to draw the different parts of an element. This is
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   365
        mainly done for reuse. If you create a new style, you can use
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   366
        the same location of sub elements as the super class.
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   367
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   368
        \o The \l{QStyle::}{subControlRect()} function is used to
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   369
        calculate bounding rectangles for sub controls in complex
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   370
        controls. When you implement a new style, you reimplement \c
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   371
        subControlRect() and calculate the rectangles that are different
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   372
        from the super class.
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   373
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   374
        \o The \l{QStyle::}{pixelMetric()} function returns a pixel
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   375
        metric, which is a style dependent size given in screen
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   376
        pixels. It takes a value of the \l{QStyle::}{PixelMetric} enum
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   377
        and returns the correct measure. Note that pixel metrics do
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   378
        not necessarily have to be static measures, but can be
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   379
        calculated with, for example, the style option.
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   380
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   381
        \o The \l{QStyle::}{hitTestComplexControl()} function returns the
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   382
        sub control that the mouse pointer is over in a complex control.
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   383
        Usually, this is simply a matter of using
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   384
        \l{QStyle::}{subControlRect()} to get the bounding rectangles of
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   385
        the sub controls, and see which rectangle contains the position of
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   386
        the cursor.
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   387
    \endlist
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   388
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   389
    QStyle also have the functions \l{QStyle::}{polish()} and
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   390
    \l{QStyle::}{unpolish()}. All widgets are sent to the \c polish()
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   391
    function before being shown and to \c unpolish() when they
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   392
    are hidden. You can use these functions to set attributes on the
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   393
    widgets or do other work that is required by your style. For
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   394
    instance, if you need to know when the mouse is hovering over the
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   395
    widget, you need to set the \l{Qt::}{WA_Hover} widget attribute.
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   396
    The State_MouseOver state flag will then be set in the widget's
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   397
    style options.
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   398
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   399
    QStyle has a few static helper functions that do some common and
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   400
    difficult tasks. They can calculate the position of a slider
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   401
    handle from the value of the slider and transform rectangles
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   402
    and draw text considering reverse layouts; see the QStyle
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   403
    class documentation for more details.
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   404
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   405
    The usual approach when one reimplements QStyle virtual
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   406
    functions is to do work on elements that are different from the
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   407
    super class; for all other elements, you can simply use the super
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   408
    class implementation.
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   409
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   410
    \section2 The Palette
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   411
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   412
    Each style provides a color - that is, QBrush - palette that
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   413
    should be used for drawing the widgets. There is one set of colors
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   414
    for the different widget states (QPalette::ColorGroup): active
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   415
    (widgets in the window that has keyboard focus), inactive (widgets
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   416
    used for other windows), and disabled (widgets that are set
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   417
    disabled). The states can be found by querying the State_Active
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   418
    and State_Enabled state flags. Each set contains color certain
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   419
    roles given by the QPalette::ColorRole enum. The roles describe in
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   420
    which situations the colors should be used (e.g., for painting
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   421
    widget backgrounds, text, or buttons).
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   422
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   423
    How the color roles are used is up to the style. For instance, if
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   424
    the style uses gradients, one can use a palette color and make it
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   425
    darker or lighter with QColor::darker() and QColor::lighter() to
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   426
    create the gradient. In general, if you need a brush that is not
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   427
    provided by the palette, you should try to derive it from one.
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   428
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   429
    QPalette, which provides the palette, stores colors for
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   430
    different widget states and color roles. The palette for a style
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   431
    is returned by \l{QStyle::}{standardPalette()}. The standard
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   432
    palette is not installed automatically when a new style is set
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   433
    on the application (QApplication::setStyle()) or widget
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   434
    (QWidget::setStyle()), so you must set the palette yourself
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   435
    with (QApplication::setPalette()) or (QWidget::setPalette()).
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   436
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   437
    It is not recommended to hard code colors as applications and
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   438
    individual widgets can set their own palette and also use the
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   439
    styles palette for drawing. Note that none of Qt's widgets set
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   440
    their own palette. The java style does hard code some colors, but
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   441
    its author looks past this in silence. Of course, it is not
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   442
    intended that the style should look good with any palette.
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   443
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   444
    \section2 Implementation Issues
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   445
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   446
    When you implement styles, there are several issues to
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   447
    consider. We will give some hints and advice on implementation
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   448
    here.
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   449
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   450
    When implementing styles, it is necessary to look through the
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   451
    code of the widgets and code of the base class and its ancestors.
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   452
    This is because the widgets use the style differently, because the
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   453
    implementation in the different styles virtual functions can
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   454
    affect the state of the drawing (e.g., by altering the QPainter
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   455
    state without restoring it and drawing some elements without using
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   456
    the appropriate pixel metrics and sub elements).
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   457
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   458
    It is recommended that the styles do not alter the proposed size
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   459
    of widgets with the QStyle::sizeFromContents() function but let
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   460
    the QCommonStyle implementation handle it. If changes need to be
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   461
    made, you should try to keep them small; application development
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   462
    may be difficult if the layout of widgets looks considerably
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   463
    different in the various styles.
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   464
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   465
    We recommend using the QPainter directly for drawing, i.e., not
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   466
    use pixmaps or images. This makes it easier for the style conform
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   467
    to the palette (although you can set your own color table on a
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   468
    QImage with \l{QImage::}{setColorTable()}).
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   469
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   470
    It is, naturally, possible to draw elements without using the
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   471
    style to draw the sub elements as intended by Qt. This is
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   472
    discouraged as custom widgets may depend on these sub elements to
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   473
    be implemented correctly. The widget walkthrough shows how Qt
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   474
    uses the sub elements.
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   475
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   476
    \section1 Java Style
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   477
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   478
    We have implemented a style that resembles the Java default look
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   479
    and feel (previously known as Metal). We have done this as it is
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   480
    relatively simple to implement and we wanted to build a style for
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   481
    this overview document. To keep it simple and not to extensive, we
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   482
    have simplified the style somewhat, but Qt is perfectly able to
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   483
    make an exact copy of the style. However, there are no concrete
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   484
    plans to implement the style as a part of Qt.
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   485
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   486
    In this section we will have a look at some implementation
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   487
    issues. Finally, we will see a complete example on the styling of
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   488
    a Java widget. We will continue to use the java style
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   489
    throughout the document for examples and widget images. The
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   490
    implementation itself is somewhat involved, and it is not
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   491
    intended that you should read through it.
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   492
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   493
    \section2 Design and Implementation
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   494
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   495
    The first step in designing the style was to select the base
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   496
    class. We chose to subclass QWindowsStyle. This class implements
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   497
    most of the functionality we need other than performing the actual
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   498
    drawing. Also, windows and java share layout of sub controls for
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   499
    several of the complex controls (which reduces the amount of code
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   500
    required considerably).
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   501
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   502
    The style is implemented in one class. We have done this
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   503
    because we find it convenient to keep all code in one file. Also,
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   504
    it is an advantage with regards to optimization as we instantiate
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   505
    less objects. We also keep the number of functions at a minimum by
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   506
    using switches to identify which element to draw in the functions.
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   507
    This results in large functions, but since we divide the code for
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   508
    each element in the switches, the code should still be easy to
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   509
    read.
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   510
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   511
    \section2 Limitations and Differences from Java
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   512
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   513
    We have not fully implemented every element in the Java style.
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   514
    This way, we have reduced the amount and complexity of the code.
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   515
    In general, the style was intended as a practical example for
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   516
    this style overview document, and not to be a part of Qt
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   517
    itself.
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   518
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   519
    Not all widgets have every state implemented. This goes for
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   520
    states that are common, e.g., State_Disabled. Each state is,
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   521
    however, implemented for at least one widget.
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   522
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   523
    We have only implemented ticks below the slider. Flat push
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   524
    buttons are also left out. We do not handle the case where the
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   525
    title bars and dock window titles grows to small for their
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   526
    contents, but simply draw sub controls over each other.
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   527
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   528
    We have not tried to emulate the Java fonts. Java and Qt use very
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   529
    different font engines, so we don't consider it worth the effort
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   530
    as we only use the style as an example for this overview.
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   531
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   532
    We have hardcoded the colors (we don't use the QPalette) for
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   533
    the linear gradients, which are used, for example, for button
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   534
    bevels, tool bars, and check boxes. This is because the Java
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   535
    palette cannot produce these colors. Java does not change these
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   536
    colors based on widget color group or role anyway (they are not
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   537
    dependent on the palette), so it does not present a problem in any
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   538
    case.
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   539
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   540
    It is Qt's widgets that are styled. Some widgets do not exist
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   541
    at all in Java, e.g., QToolBox. Others contain elements that the
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   542
    Java widgets don't. The tree widget is an example of the latter in
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   543
    which Java's JTree does not have a header.
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   544
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   545
    The style does not handle reverse layouts. We assume that the
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   546
    layout direction is left to right. QWindowsStyle handles reverse
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   547
    widgets; if we implemented reverse layouts, widgets that we change
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   548
    the position of sub elements, or handle text alignment in labels
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   549
    our selves would need to be updated.
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   550
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   551
    \section2 Styling Java Check Boxes
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   552
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   553
    As an example, we will examine the styling of check boxes in the
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   554
    java style. We describe the complete process and print all code in
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   555
    both the java style and Qt classes involved. In the rest of this
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   556
    document, we will not examine the source code of the individual
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   557
    widgets. Hopefully, this will give you an idea on how to search
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   558
    through the code if you need to check specific implementation
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   559
    details; most widgets follow the same structure as the check
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   560
    boxes. We have edited the QCommonStyle code somewhat to remove
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   561
    code that is not directly relevant for check box styling.
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   562
 
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   563
    We start with a look at how QCheckBox builds it style option,
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   564
    which is QStyleOptionButton for checkboxes:
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   565
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   566
    \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_styles.qdoc 0
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   567
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   568
    First we let QStyleOption set up the option with the information
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   569
    that is common for all widgets with \c initFrom().  We will look at
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   570
    this shortly.
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   571
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   572
    The down boolean is true when the user press the box down; this is
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   573
    true whether the box is checked or not of the checkbox.  The
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   574
    State_NoChange state is set when we have a tristate checkbox and
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   575
    it is partially checked. It has State_On if the box is checked and
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   576
    State_Off if it is unchecked. State_MouseOver is set if the mouse
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   577
    hovers over the checkbox and the widget has attribute Qt::WA_Hover
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   578
    set - you set this in QStyle::polish(). In addition, the style
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   579
    option also contains the text, icon, and icon size of the button.
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   580
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   581
    \l{QStyleOption::}{initFrom()} sets up the style option with the
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   582
    attributes that are common for all widgets. We print its
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   583
    implementation here:
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   584
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   585
    \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_styles.qdoc 1
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   586
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   587
    The State_Enabled is set when the widget is enabled. When the
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   588
    widget has focus the State_HasFocus flag is set. Equally, the
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   589
    State_Active flag is set when the widget is a child of the active
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   590
    window. The State_MouseOver will only be set if the widget has
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   591
    the WA_HoverEnabled windows flag set. Notice that keypad
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   592
    navigation must be enabled in Qt for the State_HasEditFocus to
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   593
    be included; it is not included by default.
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   594
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   595
    In addition to setting state flags the QStyleOption contains
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   596
    other information about the widget: \c direction is the layout
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   597
    direction of the layout, \c rect is the bounding rectangle of the
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   598
    widget (the area in which to draw), \c palette is the QPalette
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   599
    that should be used for drawing the widget, and \c fontMetrics is
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   600
    the metrics of the font that is used by the widget.
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   601
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   602
    We give an image of a checkbox and the style option to match
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   603
    it.
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   604
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   605
    \image javastyle/checkboxexample.png A java style checkbox
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   606
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   607
    The above checkbox will have the following state flags in its
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   608
    style option:
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   609
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   610
    \table 90%
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   611
    \header
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   612
        \o State flag
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   613
        \o Set
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   614
    \row
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   615
        \o State_Sunken
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   616
        \o Yes
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   617
    \row
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   618
        \o State_NoChange
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   619
        \o No
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   620
    \row
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   621
        \o State_On
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   622
        \o Yes
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   623
    \row
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   624
        \o State_Off
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   625
        \o No
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   626
    \row
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   627
        \o State_MouseOver
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   628
        \o Yes
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   629
    \row
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   630
        \o State_Enabled
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   631
        \o Yes
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   632
    \row
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   633
        \o State_HasFocus
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   634
        \o Yes
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   635
    \row
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   636
        \o State_KeyboardFocusChange
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   637
        \o No
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   638
    \row
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   639
        \o State_Active
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   640
        \o Yes
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   641
    \endtable
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   642
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   643
    The QCheckBox paints itself in QWidget::paintEvent() with
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   644
    style option \c opt and QStylePainter \c p. The QStylePainter
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   645
    class is a convenience class to draw style elements. Most
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   646
    notably, it wraps the methods in QStyle used for painting. The
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   647
    QCheckBox draws itself as follows:
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   648
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   649
    \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_styles.qdoc 2
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   650
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   651
    QCommonStyle handles the CE_CheckBox element. The QCheckBox
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   652
    has two sub elements: SE_CheckBoxIndicator (the checked indicator)
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   653
    and SE_CheckBoxContents (the contents, which is used for the
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   654
    checkbox label). QCommonStyle also implements these sub element
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   655
    bounding rectangles. We have a look at the QCommonStyle code:
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   656
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   657
    \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_styles.qdoc 3
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   658
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   659
    As can be seen from the code extract, the common style gets
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   660
    the bounding rectangles of the two sub elements of
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   661
    CE_CheckBox, and then draws them. If the checkbox has focus,
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   662
    the focus frame is also drawn.
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   663
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   664
    The java style draws CE_CheckBoxIndicator, while QCommonStyle
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   665
    handles CE_CheckboxLabel. We will examine each implementation and
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   666
    start with CE_CheckBoxLabel:
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   667
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   668
    \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_styles.qdoc 4
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   669
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   670
    \l{QStyle::}{visualAlignment()} adjusts the alignment of text
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   671
    according to the layout direction. We then draw an icon if it
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   672
    exists, and adjust the space left for the text.
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   673
    \l{QStyle::}{drawItemText()} draws the text taking alignment,
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   674
    layout direction, and the mnemonic into account. It also uses the
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   675
    palette to draw the text in the right color.
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   676
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   677
    The drawing of labels often get somewhat involved. Luckily, it
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   678
    can usually be handled by the base class. The java style
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   679
    implements its own push button label since Java-contrary to
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   680
    windows-center button contents also when the button has an icon.
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   681
    You can examine that implementation if you need an example of
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   682
    reimplementing label drawing.
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   683
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   684
    We take a look at the java implementation
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   685
    of CE_CheckBoxIndicator in \c drawControl():
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   686
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   687
    \snippet doc/src/snippets/javastyle.cpp 0
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   688
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   689
    We first save the state of the painter. This is not always
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   690
    necessary but in this case the QWindowsStyle needs the painter in
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   691
    the same state as it was when PE_IndicatorCheckBox was called (We
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   692
    could also set the state with function calls, of course). We then
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   693
    use \c drawButtonBackground() to draw the background of the check
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   694
    box indicator. This is a helper function that draws the background
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   695
    and also the frame of push buttons and check boxes. We take a look
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   696
    at that function below. We then check if the mouse is hovering
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   697
    over the checkbox. If it is, we draw the frame java checkboxes
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   698
    have when the box is not pressed down and the mouse is over it.
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   699
    You may note that java does not handle tristate boxes, so we have
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   700
    not implemented it.
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   701
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   702
    Here we use a png image for our indicator. We could also check
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   703
    here if the widget is disabled. We would then have to use
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   704
    another image with the indicator in the disabled color.
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   705
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   706
    \snippet doc/src/snippets/javastyle.cpp 1
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   707
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   708
    We have seen how check boxes are styled in the java style from the
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   709
    widget gets a paint request to the style is finished painting. To
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   710
    learn in detail how each widget is painted, you need to go through
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   711
    the code step-by-step as we have done here.  However, it is
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   712
    usually enough to know which style elements the widgets draw. The
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   713
    widget builds a style option and calls on the style one or more
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   714
    times to draw the style elements of which it consists. Usually,
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   715
    it is also sufficient to know the states a widget can be in and the
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   716
    other contents of the style option, i.e., what we list in the next
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   717
    section.
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   718
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   719
    \section1 Widget Walkthrough
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   720
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   721
    In this section, we will examine how most of Qt's widgets are
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   722
    styled.  Hopefully, this will save you some time and effort while
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   723
    developing your own styles and widgets. You will not find
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   724
    information here that is not attainable elsewhere (i.e., by
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   725
    examining the source code or the class descriptions for the style
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   726
    related classes).
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   727
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   728
    We mostly use java style widgets as examples. The java style does not
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   729
    draw every element in the element trees. This is because they are
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   730
    not visible for that widget in the java style. We still make sure
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   731
    that all elements are implemented in a way that conforms with the
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   732
    java style as custom widgets might need them (this does not
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   733
    exclude leaving implementations to QWindowsStyle though).
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   734
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   735
    The following is given for each widget:
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   736
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   737
    \list
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   738
        \o A table with the members (variables, etc.) of its style option.
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   739
        \o A table over the state flags (QStyle::StateFlag) that
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   740
           can be set on the widget and when the states are set.
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   741
        \o Its element tree (see section \l{The Style Elements}).
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   742
        \o An image of the widget in which the elements are outlined.
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   743
        \omit This is not written yet - probably never will be
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   744
              either
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   745
        \o List of style hints that should be checked for the
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   746
           widget.
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   747
        \o List of standard pixmaps that could be used by the
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   748
           elements.
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   749
        \endomit
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   750
    \endlist
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   751
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   752
    The element tree contains the primitive, control, and complex
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   753
    style elements. By doing a top-down traversal of the element tree,
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   754
    you get the sequence in which the elements should be drawn. In the
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   755
    nodes, we have written the sub element rectangles, sub control
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   756
    elements, and pixel metrics that should be considered when drawing
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   757
    the element of the node.
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   758
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   759
    Our approach on styling center on the drawing of the widgets. The
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   760
    calculations of sub elements rectangles, sub controls, and pixel
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   761
    metrics used \bold during drawing is only listed as contents in
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   762
    the element trees. Note that there are rectangles and pixel
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   763
    metrics that are only used by widgets. This leaves these
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   764
    calculations untreated in the walkthrough. For instance, the
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   765
    \l{QStyle::}{subControlRect()} and
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   766
    \l{QStyle::}{sizeFromContents()} functions often call
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   767
    \l{QStyle::}{subElementRect()} to calculate their bounding
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   768
    rectangles. We could draw trees for this as well. However, how
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   769
    these calculations are done is completely up to the individual
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   770
    styles, and they do not have to follow a specific structure (Qt
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   771
    does not impose a specific structure). You should still make sure
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   772
    that you use the appropriate pixel metrics, though. To limit the
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   773
    size of the document, we have therefore chosen not to include
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   774
    trees or describe the calculations made by the Java (or any other)
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   775
    style.
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   776
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   777
    You may be confused about how the different pixel metrics, sub
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   778
    element rectangles, and sub control rectangles should be used when
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   779
    examining the trees. If you are in doubt after reading the QStyle
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   780
    enum descriptions, we suggest that you examine the QCommonStyle
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   781
    and QWindowsStyle implementations.
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   782
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   783
    Some of the bounding rectangles that we outline in the widget
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   784
    images are equal. Reasons for this are that some elements draw
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   785
    backgrounds while others draw frames and labels. If in doubt,
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   786
    check the description of each element in QStyle. Also, some
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   787
    elements are there to layout, i.e., decide where to draw, other
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   788
    elements.
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   789
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   790
    \section2 Common Widget Properties
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   791
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   792
    Some states and variables are common for all widgets. These are
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   793
    set with QStyleOption::initFrom(). Not all elements use this function;
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   794
    it is the widgets that create the style options, and for some
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   795
    elements the information from \l{QStyleOption::}{initFrom()} is not
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   796
    necessary.
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   797
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   798
    A table with the common states follows:
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   799
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   800
    \table 90%
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   801
        \header
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   802
            \o State
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   803
            \o State Set When
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   804
        \row
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   805
            \o State_Enabled
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   806
            \o Set if the widget is not disabled (see
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   807
               QWidget::setEnabled())
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   808
        \row
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   809
            \o State_Focus
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   810
            \o Set if the widget has focus (see
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   811
               QWidget::hasFocus())
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   812
        \row
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   813
            \o State_KeyobordFocusChange
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   814
            \o Set when the user changes focus with the keyboard
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   815
               (see Qt::WA_KeyboardFocusChange)
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   816
        \row
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   817
            \o State_MouseOver
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   818
            \o Set if the mouse cursor is over the widget
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   819
        \row
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   820
            \o State_Active
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   821
            \o Set if the widget is a child of the active window.
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   822
        \row
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   823
            \o State_HasEditFocus
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   824
            \o Set if the widget has the edit focus
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   825
    \endtable
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   826
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   827
    The other common members for widgets are:
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   828
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   829
    \table 90%
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   830
        \header
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   831
            \o Member
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   832
            \o Content
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   833
        \row
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   834
            \o rect
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   835
            \o The bounding rectangle of the element to draw. This
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   836
               is set to the widget bounding rectangle
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   837
               (QWidget::rect()).
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   838
        \row
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   839
            \o direction
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   840
            \o The layout direction; a value of the
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   841
               Qt::LayoutDirection enum.
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   842
        \row
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   843
            \o palette
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   844
            \o The QPalette to use when drawing the element. This
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   845
               is set to the widgets palette (QWidget::palette()).
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   846
        \row
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   847
            \o fontMetrics
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   848
            \o The QFontMetrics to use when drawing text on the
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   849
               widget.
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   850
    \endtable
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   851
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   852
    The complex style options (classes that inherit
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   853
    QStyleOptionComplex) used for complex style elements share two
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   854
    variables: \l{QStyleOptionComplex::}{subControls} and
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   855
    \l{QStyleOptionComplex::}{activeSubControls}. Both variables are
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   856
    an OR'ed combination of QStyle::SubControl enum values. They
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   857
    indicate which sub controls the complex control consists of and
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   858
    which of these controls are currently active.
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   859
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   860
    As mentioned, the style calculates the size of the widgets
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   861
    contents, which the widgets calculate their size hints from. In
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   862
    addition, complex controls also use the style to test which
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   863
    sub-controls the mouse is over. 
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   864
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   865
    \section2 Widget Reference
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   866
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   867
    Without further delay, we present the widget walkthrough; each
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   868
    widget has its own sub-section.
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   869
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   870
    \section3 Push Buttons
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   871
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   872
    The style structure for push buttons is shown below. By doing a
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   873
    top-down traversal of the tree, you get the sequence in which the
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   874
    elements should be drawn.
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   875
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   876
    \image javastyle/pushbutton.png The style structure for push buttons
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   877
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   878
    The layout of the buttons, with regard element bounds, varies from
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   879
    style to style. This makes it difficult to show conceptual images
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   880
    of this. Also, elements may - even be intended to - have the same
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   881
    bounds; the PE_PushButtonBevel, for instance, is used in
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   882
    QCommonStyle to draw the elements that contains it:
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   883
    PE_FrameDefaultButton, PE_FrameButtonBevel, and
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   884
    PE_PanelButtonCommand, all of which have the same bounds in common
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   885
    and windows style.  PE_PushButtonBevel is also responsible for
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   886
    drawing the menu indicator (QCommonStyle draws
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   887
    PE_IndicatorArrowDown).
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   888
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   889
    An image of a push button in the java style that show the bounding
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   890
    rectangles of the elements is given below. Colors are used to
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   891
    separate the bounding rectangles in the image; they do not fill
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   892
    any other purpose. This is also true for similar images for the
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   893
    other widgets.
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   894
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   895
    \image javastyle/button.png
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   896
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   897
    The java style, as well as all other styles implemented in Qt,
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   898
    does not use PE_FrameButtonBevel. It is usual that a button
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   899
    with a PE_DefaultFrame adjusts the PE_PanelButtonCommand's
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   900
    rectangle by PM_ButtonDefaultIndicator. The CE_PushButtonLabel
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   901
    is found by adjusting the rect by PM_DefaultFrameWidth.
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   902
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   903
    We will now examine the style option for push
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   904
    buttons - QStyleOptionButton. A table for the states that
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   905
    QPushButton can set on the style option follows:
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   906
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   907
    \table 90%
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   908
        \header
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   909
            \o State
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   910
            \o State Set When
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   911
        \row
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   912
            \o State_Sunken
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   913
            \o Button is down or menu is pressed shown
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   914
        \row
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   915
            \o State_On
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   916
            \o Button is checked
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   917
        \row
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   918
            \o State_Raised
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   919
            \o Button is not flat and not pressed down
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   920
    \endtable
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   921
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   922
    Other members of QStyleOptionButton is:
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   923
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   924
    \table 90%
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   925
        \header
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   926
            \o Member
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   927
            \o Content
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   928
        \row
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   929
            \o features
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   930
            \o Flags of the QStyleOptionButton::ButtonFeatures enum,
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   931
               which describes various button properties (see enum)
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   932
        \row
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   933
            \o icon
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   934
            \o The buttons QIcon (if any)
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   935
        \row
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   936
            \o iconSize
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   937
            \o The QSize of the icon
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   938
        \row
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   939
            \o text
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   940
            \o a QString with the buttons text
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   941
    \endtable
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   942
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   943
    \section3 Check and Radio Buttons
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   944
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   945
    The structures for radio and check buttons are identical.
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   946
    We show the structure using QCheckBox element and pixel
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   947
    metric names:
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   948
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   949
    \image javastyle/checkbox.png
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   950
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   951
    QStyleOptionButton is used as the style option for both check
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   952
    and radio buttons. We first give a table of the states that
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   953
    can be set in the option:
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   954
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   955
    \table 90%
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   956
        \header
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   957
            \o State
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   958
            \o State Set When
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   959
        \row
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   960
            \o State_sunken
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   961
            \o The box is pressed down
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   962
        \row
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   963
            \o State_NoChange
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   964
            \o The box is partially checked (for tristate
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   965
               checkboxes.)
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   966
        \row
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   967
            \o State_On
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   968
            \o The box is checked
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   969
        \row
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   970
            \o State_Off
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   971
            \o The box is unchecked
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   972
    \endtable
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   973
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   974
    See \l{Push Buttons} for a table over other members in the
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   975
    QStyleOptionButtonClass.
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   976
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   977
    \section3 Tabs
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   978
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   979
    In Qt, QTabBar uses the style to draw its tabs. Tabs exist either
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   980
    in a QTabWidget, which contains a QTabBar, or as a separate bar.
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   981
    If the bar is not part of a tab widget, it draws its own base.
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   982
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   983
    QTabBar lays out the tabs, so the style does not have control over
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   984
    tab placement. However, while laying out its tabs, the bar asks
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   985
    the style for PM_TabBarTabHSpace and PM_TabBarTabVSpace, which is
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   986
    extra width and height over the minimum size of the tab bar tab
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   987
    label (icon and text). The style can also further influence the
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   988
    tab size before it is laid out, as the tab bar asks for
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   989
    CT_TabBarTab. The bounding rectangle of the bar is decided by the
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   990
    tab widget when it is part of the widget (still considering
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   991
    CT_TabBarTab).
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   992
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   993
    The tab bar is responsible for drawing the buttons that appear on
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   994
    the tab bar when all tabs do not fit. Their placement is not
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   995
    controlled by the style, but the buttons are \l{QToolButton}s
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   996
    and are therefore drawn by the style.
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   997
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   998
    Here is the style structure for QTabWidget and QTabBar:
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
   999
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1000
    \image javastyle/tab.png
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1001
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1002
    The dotted lines indicate that the QTabWidget contains a tab bar,
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1003
    but does not draw it itself, that QTabBar only draws its base line
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1004
    when not part of a tab widget, and that the tab bar keeps two tool
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1005
    buttons that scroll the bar when all tabs do not fit; see \l{Tool
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1006
    Buttons} for their element tree. Also note that since the buttons
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1007
    are children of the tab bar, they are drawn after the bar. The
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1008
    tabs bounding rectangles overlap the base by PM_TabBarBaseOverlap.
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1009
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1010
    Here is a tab widget in the java style:
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1011
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1012
    \image javastyle/tabwidget.png
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1013
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1014
    In the java style (and also windows), the tab bar shape and label
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1015
    have the same bounding rectangle as CE_TabBarTab. Notice that the
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1016
    tabs overlap with the tab widget frame. The base of the tab bar
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1017
    (if drawn) is the area where the tabs and frame overlap.
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1018
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1019
    The style option for tabs (QStyleOptionTab) contains the necessary
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1020
    information for drawing tabs. The option contains the position of
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1021
    the tab in the tab bar, the position of the selected tab, the
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1022
    shape of the tab, the text, and icon. After Qt 4.1 the option
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1023
    should be cast to a QStyleOptionTabV2, which also contains the
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1024
    icons size.
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1025
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1026
    As the java style tabs don't overlap, we also present an image of
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1027
    a tab widget in the windows style. Note that if you want the tabs
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1028
    to overlap horizontally, you do that when drawing the tabs in
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1029
    CE_TabBarTabShape; the tabs bounding rectangles will not be
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1030
    altered by the tab bar. The tabs are drawn from left to right in a
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1031
    north tab bar shape, top to bottom in an east tab bar shape, etc.
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1032
    The selected tab is drawn last, so that it is easy to draw it over
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1033
    the other tabs (if it is to be bigger).
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1034
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1035
    \image javastyle/windowstabimage.png
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1036
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1037
    A table of the states a tab bar can set on its tabs follows:
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1038
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1039
    \table 90%
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1040
        \header
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1041
            \o State
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1042
            \o State Set When
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1043
        \row
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1044
            \o State_Sunken
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1045
            \o The tab is pressed on with the mouse.
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1046
        \row
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1047
            \o State_Selected
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1048
            \o If it is the current tab.
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1049
        \row
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1050
            \o State_HasFocus
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1051
            \o The tab bar has focus and the tab is selected
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1052
    \endtable
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1053
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1054
    Note that individual tabs may be disabled even if the tab bar
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1055
    is not. The tab will be active if the tab bar is active.
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1056
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1057
    Here follows a table of QStyleOptionTabV2's members:
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1058
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1059
    \table 90%
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1060
        \header
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1061
            \o Member
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1062
            \o Content
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1063
        \row
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1064
            \o cornerWidgets
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1065
            \o Is flags of the CornerWidget enum, which indicate
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1066
               if and which corner widgets the tab bar has.
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1067
        \row
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1068
            \o icon
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1069
            \o The QIcon of the tab
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1070
        \row
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1071
            \o iconSize
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1072
            \o The QSize of the icon
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1073
        \row
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1074
            \o position
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1075
            \o A TabPosition enum value that indicates the tabs
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1076
               position on the bar relative to the other tabs.
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1077
        \row
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1078
            \o row
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1079
            \o holds which row the tab is in
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1080
        \row
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1081
            \o selectedPosition
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1082
            \o A value of the SelectedPosition enum that indicates
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1083
               whether the selected tab is adjacent to or is the
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1084
               tab.
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1085
        \row
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1086
            \o shape
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1087
            \o A value of the QTabBar::Shape enum indication
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1088
               whether the tab has rounded or triangular corners
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1089
               and the orientation of the tab.
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1090
        \row
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1091
            \o text
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1092
            \o The tab text
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1093
    \endtable
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1094
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1095
    The frame for tab widgets use QStyleOptionTabWidgetFrame as
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1096
    style option. We list its members here. It does not have
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1097
    states set besides the common flags.
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1098
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1099
    \table 90%
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1100
        \header
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1101
            \o Member
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1102
            \o content
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1103
        \row
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1104
            \o leftCornerWidgetSize
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1105
            \o The QSize of the left corner widget (if any).
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1106
        \row
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1107
            \o rightCornerWidgetSize
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1108
            \o The QSize of the right corner widget (if any).
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1109
        \row
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1110
            \o lineWidth
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1111
            \o holds the line with for drawing the panel.
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1112
        \row
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1113
            \o midLineWith
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1114
            \o this value is currently always 0.
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1115
        \row
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1116
            \o shape
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1117
            \o The shape of the tabs on the tab bar.
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1118
        \row
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1119
            \o tabBarSize
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1120
            \o The QSize of the tab bar.
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1121
    \endtable
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1122
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1123
    \section3 Scroll Bars
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1124
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1125
    Here is the style structure for scrollBars:
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1126
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1127
    \image javastyle/scrollbar.png
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1128
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1129
    QScrollBar simply creates its style option and then draws
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1130
    CC_ScrollBar. Some styles draw the background of add page and sub
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1131
    page with PE_PanelButtonBevel and also use indicator arrows to
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1132
    draw the arrows in the nest and previous line indicators; we have
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1133
    not included these in the tree as their use is up to the
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1134
    individual style. The style's PM_MaximumDragDistance is the
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1135
    maximum distance in pixels the mouse can move from the bounds
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1136
    of the scroll bar and still move the handle.
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1137
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1138
    Here is an image of a scrollbar in the java style:
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1139
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1140
    \image javastyle/scrollbarimage.png
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1141
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1142
    You may notice that the scrollbar is slightly different from
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1143
    Java's as it has two line up indicators. We have done this to show
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1144
    how that you can have two separate bounding rectangles for a
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1145
    single sub control. The scroll bar is an example of a widget that
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1146
    is entirely implemented by the java style - neither QWindowsStyle
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1147
    nor QCommonStyle are involved in the drawing.
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1148
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1149
    We have a look at the different states a scroll bar can set on
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1150
    the style option:
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1151
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1152
    \table 90%
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1153
        \header
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1154
            \o State
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1155
            \o State Set When
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1156
        \row
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1157
            \o State_Horizontal
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1158
            \o The scroll bar is horizontal
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1159
    \endtable
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1160
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1161
    The style option of QScrollBar is QStyleOptionSlider. Its
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1162
    members are listed in the following table. The option is used
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1163
    by all \l{QAbstractSlider}s; we only describe the members
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1164
    relevant for scroll bars here.
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1165
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1166
    \table 90%
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1167
        \header
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1168
            \o Member
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1169
            \o Content
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1170
        \row
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1171
            \o maximum
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1172
            \o the maximum value of the scroll bar
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1173
        \row
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1174
            \o minimum
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1175
            \o the minimum value of the scroll bar
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1176
        \row
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1177
            \o notchTarget
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1178
            \o the number of pixels between notches
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1179
        \row
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1180
            \o orientation
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1181
            \o a value of the Qt::Orientation enum that specifies
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1182
               whether the scroll bar is vertical or horizontal
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1183
        \row
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1184
            \o pageStep
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1185
            \o the number to increase or decrease the sliders
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1186
               value (relative to the size of the slider and its value
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1187
               range) on page steps.
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1188
        \row
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1189
            \o singleStep
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1190
            \o the number to increase or decrease the sliders
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1191
               value on single (or line) steps
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1192
        \row
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1193
            \o sliderValue
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1194
            \o The value of the slider
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1195
        \row
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1196
            \o sliderPosition
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1197
            \o the position of the slider handle. This is the same
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1198
               as \c sliderValue if the scroll bar is
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1199
               QAbstractSlider::tracking. If not, the scroll
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1200
               bar does not update its value before the mouse
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1201
               releases the handle.
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1202
        \row
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1203
            \o upsideDown
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1204
            \o holds the direction in which the scroll bar
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1205
               increases its value. This is used instead of
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1206
               QStyleOption::direction for all abstract sliders.
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1207
    \endtable
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1208
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1209
    \section3 Sliders
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1210
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1211
    When calculating the sliders size hint, PM_SliderTickness and
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1212
    PM_SliderLength is queried from the style. As with scroll bars,
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1213
    the QSlider only lets the user move the handle if the mouse is
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1214
    within PM_MaximumDragDistance from the slider bounds. When it
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1215
    draws itself it creates the style option and calls \c
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1216
    drawComplexControl() with CC_Slider:
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1217
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1218
    \image javastyle/slider.png
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1219
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1220
    We also show a picture of a slider in the java style. We show
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1221
    the bounding rectangles of the sub elements as all drawing is done
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1222
    in CC_Slider.
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1223
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1224
    \image javastyle/sliderimage.png
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1225
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1226
    QSlider uses QStyleOptionSlider as all \l{QAbstractSlider}s do. We
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1227
    present a table with the members that affect QSlider:
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1228
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1229
    \table 90%
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1230
        \header
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1231
            \o Member
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1232
            \o Content
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1233
        \row
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1234
            \o maximum
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1235
            \o the maximum value of the slider
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1236
        \row
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1237
            \o minimum
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1238
            \o the minimum value of the slider
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1239
        \row
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1240
            \o notchTarget
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1241
            \o this is the number of pixels between each notch
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1242
        \row
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1243
            \o orientation
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1244
            \o a Qt::Orientation enum value that gives whether the
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1245
               slider is vertical or horizontal.
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1246
        \row
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1247
            \o pageStep
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1248
            \o a number in slider value to increase or decrease
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1249
               for page steps
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1250
        \row
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1251
            \o singleStep
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1252
            \o the number to increase or decrease the sliders
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1253
               value on single (or line) steps.
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1254
        \row
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1255
            \o sliderValue
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1256
            \o the value of the slider.
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1257
        \row
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1258
            \o sliderPosition
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1259
            \o the position of the slider given as a slider value.
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1260
               This  will be equal to the \c sliderValue if the
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1261
               slider is \l{QAbstractSlider::}{tracking}; if
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1262
               not, the sliders value will not change until the handle is
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1263
               released with the mouse.
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1264
        \row
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1265
            \o  upsideDown
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1266
            \o  this member is used instead of QStyleOption::direction
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1267
                for all abstract sliders.
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1268
    \endtable
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1269
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1270
    You should note that the slider does not use direction for
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1271
    reverse layouts; it uses \c upsideDown.
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1272
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1273
    \section3 Spin Boxes
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1274
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1275
    When QSpinBox paints itself it creates a QStyleOptionSpinBox and
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1276
    asks the style to draw CC_SpinBox. The edit field is a line
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1277
    edit that is a child of the spin box. The dimensions of the
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1278
    field is calculated by the style with SC_SpinBoxEditField.
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1279
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1280
    Here follows the style tree for spin boxes. It is not
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1281
    required that a style uses the button panel primitive to paint
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1282
    the indicator backgrounds. You can see an image below the tree
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1283
    showing the sub elements in QSpinBox in the java style.
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1284
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1285
    \image javastyle/spinbox.png
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1286
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1287
    \image javastyle/spinboximage.png
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1288
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1289
    The QStyleOptionSpinBox, which is the style option for spin
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1290
    boxes. It can set the following states on the spin box.:
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1291
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1292
    \table 90%
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1293
        \header
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1294
            \o State
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1295
            \o State Set When
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1296
        \row
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1297
            \o State_Sunken
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1298
            \o Is set if one of the sub controls CC_SpinUp or
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1299
               CC_SpinDown is pressed on with the mouse.
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1300
    \endtable
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1301
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1302
    The rest of the members in the spin boxes style options are:
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1303
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1304
    \table 90%
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1305
        \header
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1306
            \o Property
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1307
            \o Function
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1308
        \row
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1309
            \o frame
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1310
            \o boolean that is true if the spin box is to draw a
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1311
               frame.
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1312
        \row
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1313
            \o buttonSymbols
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1314
            \o Value of the ButtonSymbols enum that decides the
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1315
               symbol on the up/down buttons.
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1316
        \row
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1317
            \o stepEnabled
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1318
            \o A value of the StepEnabled indication which of the
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1319
               spin box buttons are pressed down.
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1320
    \endtable
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1321
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1322
    \section3 Title Bar
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1323
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1324
    The title bar complex control, CC_TitleBar, is used to draw
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1325
    the title bars of internal windows in QMdiArea. It typically
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1326
    consists of a window title and close, minimize, system menu, and
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1327
    maximize buttons. Some styles also provide buttons for shading
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1328
    the window, and a button for context sensitive help.
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1329
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1330
    The bar is drawn in CC_TitleBar without using any sub elements.
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1331
    How the individual styles draw their buttons is individual, but
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1332
    there are standard pixmaps for the buttons that the style should
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1333
    provide.
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1334
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1335
    \image javastyle/titlebar.png
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1336
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1337
    In an image over a title bar in the java style, we show the
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1338
    bounding rectangles of the sub elements supported by the java style
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1339
    (all of which are drawn with standard pixmaps). It is usual to
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1340
    draw the button backgrounds using PE_PanelButtonTool, but it's no
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1341
    rule.
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1342
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1343
    \image javastyle/titlebarimage.png
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1344
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1345
    The style option for title bars is QStyleOptionTitleBar. It's
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1346
    members are:
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1347
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1348
    \table 90%
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1349
        \header
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1350
            \o Member
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1351
            \o Content
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1352
        \row
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1353
            \o icon
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1354
            \o The title bars icon
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1355
        \row
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1356
            \o text
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1357
            \o the text for the title bar's label
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1358
        \row
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1359
            \o windowFlags
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1360
            \o flags of the Qt::WindowFlag enum. The window flags
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1361
               used by QMdiArea for window management.
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1362
        \row
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1363
            \o titleBarState
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1364
            \o this is the QWidget::windowState() of the window
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1365
               that contains the title bar.
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1366
    \endtable
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1367
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1368
    \section3 Combo Box
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1369
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1370
    A QComboBox uses the style to draw the button and label of
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1371
    non-editable boxes with CC_ComboBox and CE_ComboBoxLabel.
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1372
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1373
    The list that pops up when the user clicks on the combo box is
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1374
    drawn by a \l{Delegate Classes}{delegate}, which we do not cover
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1375
    in this overview. You can, however, use the style to control the
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1376
    list's size and position with the sub element
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1377
    SC_ComboBoxListBoxPopup. The style also decides where the edit
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1378
    field for editable boxes should be with SC_ComboBoxEditField; the
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1379
    field itself is a QLineEdit that is a child of the combo box.
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1380
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1381
    \image javastyle/combobox.png
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1382
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1383
    We show an image over a java style combo box in which we have
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1384
    outlined its sub elements and sub element rectangles:
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1385
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1386
    \image javastyle/comboboximage.png
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1387
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1388
    Java combo boxes do not use the focus rect; it changes its
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1389
    background color when it has focus. The SC_ComboBoxEdit field is
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1390
    used both by QComboBox to calculate the size of the edit field and
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1391
    the style for calculating the size of the combo box label.
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1392
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1393
    The style option for combo boxes is QStyleOptionComboBox. It
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1394
    can set the following states:
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1395
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1396
    \table 90%
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1397
        \header
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1398
            \o State
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1399
            \o Set When
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1400
        \row
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1401
            \o State_Selected
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1402
            \o The box is not editable and has focus
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1403
        \row
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1404
            \o State_Sunken
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1405
            \o SC_ComboBoxArrow is active
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1406
        \row
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1407
            \o State_on
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1408
            \o The container (list) of the box is visible
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1409
    \endtable
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1410
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1411
    The style options other members are:
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1412
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1413
    \table
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1414
        \header
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1415
            \o Member
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1416
            \o Content
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1417
        \row
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1418
            \o currentIcon
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1419
            \o the icon of the current (selected) item of the
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1420
               combo box.
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1421
        \row
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1422
            \o currentText
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1423
            \o the text of the current item in the box.
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1424
        \row
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1425
            \o editable
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1426
            \o holds whether the combo box is editable or not
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1427
        \row
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1428
            \o frame
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1429
            \o holds whether the combo box has a frame or not
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1430
        \row
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1431
            \o iconSize
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1432
            \o the size of the current items icon.
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1433
        \row
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1434
            \o popupRect
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1435
            \o the bounding rectangle of the combo box's popup
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1436
               list.
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1437
    \endtable
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1438
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1439
    \section3 Group Boxes
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1440
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1441
    When calculating the size hint, QGroupBox fetches three pixel
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1442
    metrics from the style: PM_IndicatorWidth,
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1443
    PM_CheckBoxLabelSpacing, and PM_IndicatorHeight.  QGroupBox has
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1444
    the following style element tree:
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1445
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1446
    \image javastyle/groupbox.png
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1447
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1448
    Qt does not impose restrictions on how the check box is drawn; the
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1449
    java style draws it with CE_IndicatorCheckBox. See \l{Check and
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1450
    Radio Buttons} for the complete tree.
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1451
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1452
    We also give an image of the widget with the sub controls and
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1453
    sub control rectangles drawn:
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1454
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1455
    \image javastyle/groupboximage.png
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1456
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1457
    The style option for group boxes are QStyleOptionGroupBox. The
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1458
    following states can be set on it:
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1459
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1460
    \table 90%
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1461
        \header
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1462
            \o State
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1463
            \o Set When
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1464
        \row
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1465
            \o State_On
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1466
            \o The check box is checked
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1467
        \row
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1468
            \o State_Sunken
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1469
            \o The checkbox is pressed down
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1470
        \row
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1471
            \o State_Off
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1472
            \o The check box is unchecked (or there is no check box)
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1473
    \endtable
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1474
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1475
    The remaining members of QStyleOptionGroupBox are:
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1476
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1477
    \table
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1478
        \header
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1479
            \o Member
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1480
            \o Content
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1481
        \row
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1482
            \o features
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1483
            \o flags of the QStyleOptionFrameV2::FrameFeatures
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1484
               enum describing the frame of the group box.
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1485
        \row
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1486
            \o lineWidth
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1487
            \o the line width with which to draw the panel. This
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1488
               is always 1.
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1489
        \row
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1490
            \o text
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1491
            \o the text of the group box.
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1492
        \row
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1493
            \o textAlignment
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1494
            \o the alignment of the group box title
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1495
        \row
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1496
            \o textColor
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1497
            \o the QColor of the text
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1498
    \endtable
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1499
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1500
    \section3 Splitters
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1501
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1502
    As the structure of splitters are simple and do not contain any
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1503
    sub elements, we do not include image of splitters. CE_Splitter
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1504
    does not use any other elements or metrics.
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1505
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1506
    For its style option, Splitters uses the base class QStyleOption.
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1507
    It can set the following state flags on it:
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1508
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1509
    \table 90%
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1510
        \header
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1511
            \o State
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1512
            \o Set When
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1513
        \row
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1514
            \o State_Horizontal
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1515
            \o Set if it is a horizontal splitter
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1516
    \endtable
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1517
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1518
    QSplitter does not use \l{QStyleOption::}{initFrom()} to set up its
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1519
    option; it sets the State_MouseOver and State_Disabled flags
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1520
    itself.
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1521
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1522
    \section3 Progress Bar
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1523
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1524
    The CE_ProgressBar element is used by QProgressBar, and it is the
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1525
    only element used by this widget. We start with looking at the
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1526
    style structure:
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1527
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1528
    \image javastyle/progressbar.png
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1529
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1530
    Here is a progress bar in the windows style (the java style
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1531
    bounding rectangles are equal):
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1532
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1533
    \image javastyle/progressbarimage.png
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1534
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1535
    The style option for QProgressBar is QStyleOptionProgressBarV2.
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1536
    The bar does not set any state flags, but the other members of the
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1537
    option are:
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1538
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1539
    \table 90%
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1540
        \header
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1541
            \o Member
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1542
            \o Content
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1543
        \row
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1544
            \o minimum
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1545
            \o The minimum value of the bar
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1546
        \row
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1547
            \o maximum
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1548
            \o The maximum value of the bar
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1549
        \row
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1550
            \o progress
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1551
            \o The current value of the bar
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1552
        \row
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1553
            \o textAlignment
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1554
            \o How the text is aligned in the label
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1555
        \row
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1556
            \o textVisible
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1557
            \o Whether the label is drawn
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1558
        \row
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1559
            \o text
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1560
            \o The label text
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1561
        \row
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1562
            \o orientation
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1563
            \o Progress bars can be vertical or horizontal
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1564
        \row
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1565
            \o invertedAppearance
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1566
            \o The progress is inverted (i.e., right to left in a
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1567
               horizontal bar)
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1568
        \row
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1569
            \o bottomToTop
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1570
            \o Boolean that if true, turns the label of vertical
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1571
               progress bars 90 degrees.
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1572
    \endtable
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1573
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1574
    \section3 Tool Buttons
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1575
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1576
    Tool buttons exist either independently or as part of tool bars.
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1577
    They are drawn equally either way. The QToolButton draws only one
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1578
    style element: CC_ToolButton.
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1579
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1580
    As you must be used to by now (at least if you have read this
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1581
    document sequentially), we have a tree of the widget's style
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1582
    structure:
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1583
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1584
    \image javastyle/toolbutton.png
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1585
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1586
    Note that PE_FrameButtonTool and PE_IndicatorArrowDown are
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1587
    included in the tree as the java style draws them, but they can
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1588
    safely be omitted if you prefer it. The structure may also be
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1589
    different. QWindowsStyle, for instance, draws both
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1590
    PE_IndicatorButtonDropDown and PE_IndicatorArrowDown in
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1591
    CE_ToolButton.
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1592
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1593
    We also have an image of a tool button where we have outlined
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1594
    the sub element bounding rectangles and sub controls.
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1595
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1596
    \image javastyle/toolbuttonimage.png
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1597
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1598
    Here is the states table for tool buttons:
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1599
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1600
    \table 90%
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1601
        \header
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1602
            \o State
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1603
            \o Set When
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1604
        \row
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1605
            \o State_AutoRise
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1606
            \o the tool button has the autoRise property set
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1607
        \row
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1608
            \o State_raised
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1609
            \o the button is not sunken (i.e., by being checked or
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1610
               pressed on with the mouse).
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1611
        \row
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1612
            \o State_Sunken
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1613
            \o the button is down
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1614
        \row
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1615
            \o State_On
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1616
            \o the button is checkable and checked.
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1617
    \endtable
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1618
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1619
    QStyleOptionToolButton also contains the following members:
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1620
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1621
    \table
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1622
        \header
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1623
            \o Member
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1624
            \o Content
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1625
        \row
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1626
            \o arrowType
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1627
            \o a Qt::ArrowType enum value, which contains the
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1628
                 direction of the buttons arrow (if an arrow is to
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1629
                 be used in place of an icon)
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1630
        \row
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1631
            \o features
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1632
            \o flags of the QStyleOptionToolButton::ButtonFeature
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1633
               enum describing if the button has an arrow, a menu,
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1634
               and/or has a popup-delay.
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1635
        \row
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1636
            \o font
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1637
            \o the QFont of the buttons label
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1638
        \row
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1639
            \o icon
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1640
            \o the QIcon of the tool button
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1641
        \row
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1642
            \o iconSize
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1643
            \o the icon size of the button's icon
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1644
        \row
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1645
            \o pos
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1646
            \o the position of the button, as given by
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1647
               QWidget::pos()
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1648
        \row
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1649
            \o text
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1650
            \o the text of the button
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1651
        \row
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1652
            \o toolButtonStyle
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1653
            \o a Qt::ToolButtonStyle enum value which decides
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1654
               whether the button shows the icon, the text, or both.
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1655
    \endtable
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1656
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1657
    \section3 Toolbars
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1658
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1659
    Toolbars are part of the \l{QMainWindow}{main window framework}
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1660
    and cooperates with the QMainWindow to which it belongs while it
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1661
    builds its style option. A main window has 4 areas that toolbars
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1662
    can be placed in. They are positioned next to the four sides of
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1663
    the window (i.e., north, south, west, and east). Within each area
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1664
    there can be more than one line of toolbars; a line consists of
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1665
    toolbars with equal orientation (vertical or horizontal) placed
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1666
    next to each other.
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1667
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1668
    \l{QToolbar}{QToolbar}s in Qt consists of three elements
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1669
    CE_ToolBar, PE_IndicatorToolBarHandle, and
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1670
    PE_IndicatorToolBarSeparator. It is QMainWindowLayout that
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1671
    calculates the bounding rectangles (i.e., position and size of the
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1672
    toolbars and their contents. The main window also uses the \c
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1673
    sizeHint() of the items in the toolbars when calculating the size
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1674
    of the bars.
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1675
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1676
    Here is the element tree for QToolBar:
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1677
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1678
    \image javastyle/toolbar.png
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1679
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1680
    The dotted lines indicate that the QToolBar keeps an instance of
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1681
    QToolBarLayout and that QToolBarSeparators are kept by
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1682
    QToolBarLayout. When the toolbar is floating (i.e., has its own
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1683
    window) the PE_FrameMenu element is drawn, else QToolbar draws
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1684
    CE_ToolBar.
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1685
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1686
    Here is an image of a toolbar in the java style:
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1687
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1688
    \image javastyle/toolbarimage.png
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1689
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1690
    QToolBarSaparator uses QStyleOption for their style option. It
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1691
    sets the State_horizontal flag if the toolbar they live in is
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1692
    horizontal. Other than that, they use \l{QStyleOption::}{initFrom()}.
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1693
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1694
    The style option for QToolBar is QStyleOptionToolBar. The only
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1695
    state flag set (besides the common flags) is State_Horizontal
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1696
    if the bar is horizontal (i.e., in the north or south toolbar area).
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1697
    The member variables of the style option are:
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1698
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1699
    \table 90%
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1700
        \header
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1701
            \o Member
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1702
            \o Content
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1703
        \row
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1704
            \o features
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1705
            \o Holds whether the bar is movable in a value of the
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1706
               ToolBarFeature, which is either Movable or None.
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1707
        \row
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1708
            \o lineWidth
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1709
            \o The width of the tool bar frame.
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1710
        \row
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1711
            \o midLineWidth
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1712
            \o This variable is currently not used and is always
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1713
               0.
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1714
        \row
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1715
            \o positionOfLine
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1716
            \o The position of the toolbar line within the toolbar
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1717
               area to which it belongs.
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1718
        \row
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1719
            \o positionWithinLine
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1720
            \o The position of the toolbar within the toolbar line.
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1721
        \row
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1722
            \o toolBarArea
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1723
            \o The toolbar area in which the toolbar lives.
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1724
    \endtable
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1725
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1726
    \section3 Menus
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1727
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1728
    Menus in Qt are implemented in QMenu. The QMenu keeps a list of
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1729
    action, which it draws as menu items. When QMenu receives paint
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1730
    events ,it calculates the size of each menu item and draws them
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1731
    individually with CE_MenuItem. (Menu items do not have a separate
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1732
    element for their label (contents), so all drawing is done in
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1733
    CE_MenuItem. The menu also draws the frame of the menu with
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1734
    PE_FrameMenu. It also draws CE_MenuScroller if the style supports
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1735
    scrolling. CE_MenuTearOff is drawn if the menu is to large for its
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1736
    bounding rectangle.
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1737
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1738
    In the style structure tree, we also include QMenu as it also does
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1739
    styling related work. The bounding rectangles of menu items are
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1740
    calculated for the menus size hint and when the menu is displayed
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1741
    or resized.
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1742
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1743
    \image javastyle/menu.png
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1744
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1745
    The CE_MenuScroller and CE_MenuTearOff elements are handled by
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1746
    QCommonStyle and are not shown unless the menu is to large to fit
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1747
    on the screen. PE_FrameMenu is only drawn for pop-up menus.
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1748
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1749
    QMenu calculates rectangles based on its actions and calls
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1750
    CE_MenuItem and CE_MenuScroller if the style supports that.
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1751
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1752
    It is also usual to use PE_IndicatorCheckBox (instead of using
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1753
    PE_IndicatorMenuCheckMark) and PE_IndicatorRadioButton for drawing
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1754
    checkable menu items; we have not included them in the style tree
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1755
    as this is optional and varies from style to style.
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1756
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1757
    \image javastyle/menuimage.png
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1758
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1759
    The style option for menu items is QStyleOptionMenuItem. The
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1760
    following tables describe its state flags and other members.
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1761
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1762
    \table 90%
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1763
        \header
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1764
            \o State
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1765
            \o Set When
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1766
        \row
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1767
            \o State_Selected
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1768
            \o The mouse is over the action and the action is not
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1769
               a separator.
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1770
        \row
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1771
            \o State_Sunken
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1772
            \o The mouse is pressed down on the menu item.
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1773
        \row
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1774
            \o State_DownArrow
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1775
            \o Set if the menu item is a menu scroller and it scrolls
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1776
               the menu downwards.
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1777
    \endtable
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1778
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1779
    \table 90%
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1780
        \header
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1781
            \o Member
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1782
            \o Content
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1783
        \row
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1784
            \o checkType
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1785
            \o A value of the \l{QStyleOptionMenuItem::}{CheckType} enum,
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1786
               which is either NotCheckable, Exclusive, or
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1787
               NonExclusive.
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1788
        \row
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1789
            \o checked
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1790
            \o Boolean that is true if the menu item is checked.
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1791
        \row
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1792
            \o font
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1793
            \o The QFont to use for the menu item's text.
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1794
        \row
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1795
            \o icon
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1796
            \o the QIcon of the menu item.
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1797
        \row
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1798
            \o maxIconWidth
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1799
            \o The maximum width allowed for the icon
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1800
        \row
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1801
            \o menuHasChecableItem
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1802
            \o Boolean which is true if at least one item in the
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1803
               menu is checkable.
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1804
        \row
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1805
            \o menuItemType
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1806
            \o The type of the menu item. This a value of the
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1807
               \l{QStyleOptionMenuItem::}{MenuItemType}.
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1808
        \row
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1809
            \o menuRect
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1810
            \o The bounding rectangle for the QMenu that the menu
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1811
               item lives in.
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1812
        \row
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1813
            \o tabWidth
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1814
            \o This is the distance between the text of the menu
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1815
               item and the shortcut.
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1816
        \row
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1817
            \o text
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1818
            \o The text of the menu item.
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1819
    \endtable
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1820
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1821
    The setup of the style option for CE_MenuTearOff and
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1822
    CE_MenuScroller also uses QStyleOptionMenuItem; they only set the
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1823
    \c menuRect variable in addition to the common settings with
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1824
    QStyleOption's \l{QStyleOption::}{initFrom()}. 
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1825
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1826
    \section3 Menu Bar
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1827
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1828
    QMenuBar uses the style to draw each menu bar item and the empty
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1829
    area of the menu bar. The pull-down menus themselves are
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1830
    \l{QMenu}s (see \l{Menus}). The style element tree for the menu
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1831
    bar follows:
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1832
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1833
    \image javastyle/menubar.png
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1834
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1835
    The panel and empty area is drawn after the menu items. The
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1836
    QPainter that the QMenuBar sends to the style has the bounding
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1837
    rectangles of the items clipped out (i.e., clip region), so you
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1838
    don't need to worry about drawing over the items. The pixel
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1839
    metrics in QMenuBar is used when the bounding rectangles of the
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1840
    menu bar items are calculated.
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1841
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1842
    \image javastyle/menubarimage.png
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1843
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1844
    QStyleOptionMenuItem is used for menu bar items. The members that
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1845
    are used by QMenuBar is described in the following table:
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1846
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1847
    \table
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1848
        \header
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1849
            \o Member
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1850
            \o Content
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1851
        \row
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1852
            \o menuRect
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1853
            \o the bounding rectangle of the entire menu bar to
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1854
               which the item belongs.
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1855
        \row
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1856
            \o text
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1857
            \o the text of the item
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1858
        \row
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1859
            \o icon
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1860
            \o the icon of the menu item (it is not common that
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1861
               styles draw this icon)
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1862
    \endtable
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1863
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1864
    QStyleOptionMenuItem is also used for drawing CE_EmptyMenuBarArea.
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1865
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1866
    QStyleOptionFrame is used for drawing the panel frame The
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1867
    \l{QStyleOptionFrame::}{lineWidth} is set to PM_MenuBarPanelWidth.
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1868
    The \l{QStyleOptionFrame::}{midLineWidth} is currently always set
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1869
    to 0. 
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1870
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1871
    \section3 Item View Headers
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1872
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1873
    It is the style that draws the headers of Qt's item views. The
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1874
    item views keeps the dimensions on individual sections. Also
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1875
    note that the delegates may use the style to paint decorations
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1876
    and frames around items. QItemDelegate, for instance, draws
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1877
    PE_FrameFocusRect and PE_IndicatorViewItemCheck.
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1878
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1879
    \image javastyle/header.png
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1880
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1881
    Here is a QTableWidget showing the bounding rects of a Java
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1882
    header:
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1883
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1884
    \image javastyle/headerimage.png
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1885
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1886
    The QHeaderView uses CT_HeaderSection, PM_HeaderMargin and
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1887
    PM_HeaderGripMargin for size and hit test calculations. The
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1888
    PM_HeaderMarkSize is currently not used by Qt. QTableView draws
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1889
    the button in the top-left corner (i.e., the area where the
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1890
    vertical and horizontal headers intersect) as a CE_Header.
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1891
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1892
    The style option for header views is QStyleOptionHeader. The view
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1893
    paints one header section at a time, so the data is for the
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1894
    section being drawn. Its contents are:
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1895
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1896
    \table 90%
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1897
        \header
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1898
            \o Member
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1899
            \o Content
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1900
        \row
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1901
            \o icon
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1902
            \o the icon of the header (for section that is being
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1903
               drawn).
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1904
        \row
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1905
            \o iconAlignment
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1906
            \o the alignment (Qt::Alignment) of the icon in the header.
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1907
        \row
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1908
            \o orientation
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1909
            \o a Qt::Orientation value deciding whether the header
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1910
               is the horizontal header above the view or the
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1911
               vertical header on the left.
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1912
        \row
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1913
            \o position
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1914
            \o a QStyleOptionHeader::SectionPosition value
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1915
               giving the header section's position relative to
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1916
               the other sections.
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1917
        \row
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1918
            \o section
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1919
            \o holds the section that is being drawn.
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1920
        \row
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1921
            \o selectedPosition
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1922
            \o a QStyleOptionHeader::SelectedPosition value giving
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1923
               the selected section's position relative to the
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1924
               section that is being painted.
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1925
        \row
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1926
            \o sortIndicator
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1927
            \o a QStyleOptionHeader::SortIndicator value that
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1928
               describes the direction in which the section's sort
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1929
               indicator should be drawn.
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1930
        \row
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1931
            \o text
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1932
            \o the text of the currently drawn section.
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1933
        \row
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1934
            \o textAlignment
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1935
            \o the Qt::Alignment of the text within the
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1936
               headersection.
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1937
    \endtable
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1938
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1939
    \section3 Tree Branch Indicators
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1940
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1941
    The branch indicators in a tree view is drawn by the style with
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1942
    PE_IndicatorBranch. We think of indicators here as the indicators
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1943
    that describe the relationship of the nodes in the tree. The
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1944
    generic QStyleOption is sent to the style for drawing this
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1945
    elements. The various branch types are described by states. Since
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1946
    there are no specific style option, we simply present the states
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1947
    table:
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1948
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1949
    \table 90%
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1950
        \header
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1951
            \o State
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1952
            \o Set When
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1953
        \row
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1954
            \o State_Sibling
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1955
            \o the node in the tree has a sibling (i.e., there is
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1956
               another node in the same column).
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1957
        \row
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1958
            \o State_Item
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1959
            \o this branch indicator has an item.
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1960
        \row
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1961
            \o State_Children
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1962
            \o the branch has children (i.e., a new sub-tree can
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1963
               be opened at the branch).
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1964
        \row
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1965
            \o State_Open
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1966
            \o the branch indicator has an opened sub-tree.
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1967
    \endtable
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1968
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1969
    The tree view (and tree widget) use the style to draw the branches
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1970
    (or nodes if you will) of the tree.
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1971
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1972
    QStyleOption is used as the style for PE_IndicatorBranch has state
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1973
    flags set depending on what type of branch it is.
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1974
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1975
    Since there is no tree structure for branch indicators, we only
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1976
    present an image of a tree in the java style. Each state is marked
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1977
    in the image with a rectangle in a specific color (i.e., these
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1978
    rectangles are not bounding rectangles). All combinations of
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1979
    states you must be aware of are represented in the image.
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1980
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1981
    \image javastyle/branchindicatorimage.png
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1982
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1983
    \section3 Tool Boxes
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1984
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1985
    PM_SmallIconSize for sizeHints.
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1986
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1987
    QToolBox is a container that keeps a collection of widgets. It has
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1988
    one tab for each widget and display one of them at a time. The
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1989
    tool box lays the components it displays (the tool box buttons
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1990
    and selected widget) in a QVBoxLayout. The style tree for tool
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1991
    boxes looks like this:
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1992
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1993
    \image javastyle/toolbox.png
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1994
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1995
    We show an image of a tool box in the Plastique style:
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1996
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1997
    \image javastyle/toolboximage.png
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1998
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  1999
    All elements have the same bounding rectangles in the
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  2000
    Plastique as well as the other Qt built-in styles.
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  2001
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  2002
    The style option for tool boxes is QStyleOptionToolBox. It
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  2003
    contains the text and icon of the tool box contents. The only
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  2004
    state set by QToolBox is State_Sunken, which is set when the user
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  2005
    presses a tab down with the mouse. The rest of the
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  2006
    QStyleOptionToolBox members are:
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  2007
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  2008
    \table 90%
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  2009
        \header
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  2010
            \o Member
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  2011
            \o Content
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  2012
        \row
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  2013
            \o icon
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  2014
            \o the icon on the toolbox tab
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  2015
        \row
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  2016
            \o text
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  2017
            \o the text on the toolbox tab
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  2018
    \endtable
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  2019
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  2020
    \section3 Size Grip
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  2021
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  2022
    The size grip calculates its size hint with CT_SizeGrip. The pixel
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  2023
    metric PM_SizeGripSize is currently unused by Qt. The element tree
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  2024
    for and an image in the Plastique style of QSizeGrip follows:
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  2025
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  2026
    \image javastyle/sizegrip.png
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  2027
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  2028
    \image javastyle/sizegripimage.png
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  2029
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  2030
    We show the size grip in a \l{QMainWindow}'s bottom right
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  2031
    corner.
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  2032
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  2033
    The size grip style option, QStyleOptionSizeGrip, have one
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  2034
    member except the common members from QStyleOption:
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  2035
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  2036
    \table 90%
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  2037
        \header
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  2038
            \o Member
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  2039
            \o Content
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  2040
        \row
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  2041
            \o corner
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  2042
            \o a Qt::Corner value that describe which corner in a
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  2043
               window (or equivalent) the grip is located.
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  2044
    \endtable
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  2045
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  2046
    \section3 Rubber Band
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  2047
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  2048
    The \l{QRubberBand}'s style tree consists of two nodes.
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  2049
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  2050
    \image javastyle/rubberband.png
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  2051
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  2052
    We present an image of a Java style window being moved in a
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  2053
    QMdiArea with a rubber band:
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  2054
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  2055
    \image javastyle/rubberbandimage.png
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  2056
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  2057
    The style option for rubber bands is QStyleOptionRubberBand.
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  2058
    Its members are:
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  2059
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  2060
    \table
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  2061
        \header
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  2062
            \o Member
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  2063
            \o Content
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  2064
        \row
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  2065
            \o opaque
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  2066
            \o boolean that is true if the rubber band must be
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  2067
               drawn in an opaque style (i.e., color)
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  2068
        \row
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  2069
            \o shape
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  2070
            \o a QRubberBand::Shape enum value that holds the
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  2071
               shape of the band (which is either a rectangle or a
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  2072
               line) 
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  2073
    \endtable
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  2074
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  2075
    \section3 Dock Widgets
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  2076
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  2077
    When the dock widget lays out its contents it asks the style for
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  2078
    these pixel metrics: PM_DockWidgetSeparatorExtent,
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  2079
    PM_DockWidgetTitleBarButtonMargin, PM_DockWidgetFrameWidth, and
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  2080
    PM_DockWidgetTitleMargin. It also calculates the bounding
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  2081
    rectangles of the float and close buttons with
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  2082
    SE_DockWidgetCloseButton and SE_DockWidgetFloatButton.
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  2083
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  2084
    \image javastyle/dockwidget.png
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  2085
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  2086
    The dotted lines indicate that the sender keeps instances of the
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  2087
    recipient of the arrow (i.e., it is not a style element to draw).
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  2088
    The dock widget only draws PE_frameDockWidget when it is detached
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  2089
    from its main window (i.e., it is a top level window). If it is
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  2090
    docked it draws the indicator dock widget resize handle. We show a
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  2091
    dock widget in both docked and floating state in the plastique
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  2092
    style: 
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  2093
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  2094
    \image javastyle/dockwidgetimage.png
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  2095
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  2096
    The style option is QStyleOptionDockWidget:
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  2097
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  2098
    \table 90%
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  2099
        \header
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  2100
            \o Member
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  2101
            \o Content
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  2102
        \row
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  2103
            \o closeable
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  2104
            \o boolean that holds whether the dock window can be
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  2105
               closed
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  2106
        \row
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  2107
            \o floatable
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  2108
            \o boolean that holds whether the dock window can
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  2109
               float (i.e., detach from the main window in which
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  2110
               it lives)
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  2111
        \row
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  2112
            \o movable
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  2113
            \o boolean that holds whether the window is movable
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  2114
               (i.e., can move to other dock widget areas)
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  2115
        \row
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  2116
            \o title
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  2117
            \o the title text of the dock window
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  2118
    \endtable
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  2119
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  2120
    For the buttons, QStyleOptionButton is used (see \l{Tool Buttons}
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  2121
    for content description). The dock widget resize handle has a
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  2122
    plain QStyleOption.
1918ee327afb Revision: 200952
Alex Gilkes <alex.gilkes@nokia.com>
parents:
diff changeset
  2123
*/